‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ "ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ" ﻭ"ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" ﺑﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
 ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ EOS REBEL T2i/EOS 550D‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪DIGIC 4‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٫٧‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪) Full HD‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٣٣‬ﻭ‪(٢٣٤‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٢‬ﻭ‪.(١٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻋﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ .SDXC‬ﻭﺳﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ"‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬
 ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪*LC-E8/LC-E8E‬‬ ‫‪LP-E8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ(‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬

‫)ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪EW-100DB III‬‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬

‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ(‬ ‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬

‫* ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LC-E8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ LC-E8E‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‪) .‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ‪ LC-E8E‬ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪<6‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪.<S‬‬ ‫>‪<V> <U‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪<0‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ :8 ،7 ،9 ،0‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫‪ : 3‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪M‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫)ﺹ **( ‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <1‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳُﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S18-55mm f‬‬
‫‪.3.5-5.6 IS/‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ )‪ (DSLR‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٢٤٣‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫‪٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٣ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪٥ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪١٠ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٢ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦ ................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٤ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٢٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٧ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪٢٩ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪٣٠ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٣١ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪٣٣ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٥ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٣٦ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪٣٨ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٤٠ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٤٢ ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٤٤ .................................................................................... LCD‬‬

‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‪٤٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪٤٨ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٤٩ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪٥٠ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪٥١ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪٥٢ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪٥٣ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ‪٥٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪٥٥ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٥٨ ..................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪٥٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٦٠ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦٢ ............................................................................................ ISO‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪٦٤ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :E‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦٦ ....................................................................(AF‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦٨ .................................................................. (AF‬‬
‫‪ :MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪٦٩ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪٧٠ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٧١ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٧٢ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٧٥ ...........................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٧٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬

‫‪ :s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪٧٨ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪٨٠ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪٨٢ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪٨٣ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٨٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫‪ q‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٨٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ Oy‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٨٧ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪٨٩ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٩١ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٩٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٩٦ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٩٧ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٩٨ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٩٩ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪١٠١ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٠٣ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٠٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٠٦ .................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪١٠٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬ ‫‪٥‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٠٨ ............................................................................. LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١١١ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١١٣ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١٢٠ ...................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪١٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬

‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٢٤ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٣٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬

‫‪١٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪١٣٨ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪١٣٨ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٣٨ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٣٨ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٣٩ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٣٩ ...................................................................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪١٤٠ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪١٤٢ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٤٣ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪١٤٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٤٦ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٤٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٤٧ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٥٠ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪١٥١ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٥٣ .........................................................................................‬‬

‫‪١٥٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬

‫‪ HI‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٥٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪١٥٨ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٥٩ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٦٠ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٦٢ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٦٤ .............................................................................‬‬

‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪١٦٥ .................................................................................‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٦٧ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٧٠ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٧١ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٧٣ .................................................................................‬‬

‫‪١٧٥‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪٩‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٧٦ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٧٨ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٨٣ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪١٨٥ ......................................................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪١٨٨ .............................................‬‬

‫‪١٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٩٠ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٩٢ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪١٩٨ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪١٩٩ .......................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٢٠١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪٢٠٢ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪٢٠٣ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪٢٠٤ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪٢٠٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪٢٠٨ ..........................................................................................Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢١٠ ..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٢١٢ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪٢١٦ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ‪٢١٨ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪٢٢٤ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢٢٥ ..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٢٣٧ ..............................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٢٤٣‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫‪٩‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٧ - ٤٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫)‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻭ‪ ٥٣‬ﻭ‪٧٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫)‪j‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫)‪s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ f) ٨٠‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬

‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨٧‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬

‫)‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٤٦‬ﻭ‪ ٦٢‬ﻭ‪٦٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‬

‫)‪ 7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٤٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٨٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫)‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٠٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫)‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬

‫‪١٠‬‬
 ‫)‪(1 ،83 ،73‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫)‪(86 ،76‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(AI Servo‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٥٣‬ﻭ‪٦٧‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫)‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٨‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫)‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٥٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬

‫)‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻲ‬

‫)‪ L‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧١‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫)ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٦٧‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬

‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٥‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬

‫‪١١‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻛﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٪ ٩٩،٩٩‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪ ٠،٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮّﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻳﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Canon‬‬

‫‪١٣‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٣‬‬ ‫‪White index‬‬ ‫‪Red index‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻣﻊ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<AF‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٩‬‬

‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬

‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪<x‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٨‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧١‬‬

‫‪١٥‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٤٧/٦٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫>‪ <Z‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF-S‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫>‪ < 6‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠٦‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤‬‬
‫>‪ <V‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺹ ‪(٥٢‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧١/٦٥‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٣٤‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ >‪<D‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٠٤ ،١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٣ ،١٠٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺑﻮﺱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٨٢‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٤‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠٥‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٦ ،١٦٩‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ‬

‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٧‬‬

‫‪١٦‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٣٦‬‬

‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٤/١٠٨‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٦‬‬

‫>‪ <A/I‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ >‪<B‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪/١٥٦/٩٨/٩٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪(١٨٣ ،١٥٨‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪،١٢٦ ،١١٠ ،٤٤‬‬
‫>‪ <S/u‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪(١٧٣ ،١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٨٣ ،١٥٨/٦٨‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٦٢‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٣٩ ،٤٠‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ‬

‫>‪ <O‬ﺯﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٧/٨٣‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬

‫>‪ <Q/l‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٨١/٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫>‪ <x‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬

‫>‪ <S‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٤٠‬‬ ‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﺹ ‪(١٧١‬‬

‫>‪ <WB‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫>‪ <XA‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫>‪ <Yi/Q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٧١ ،٧٠‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٦٦‬‬ ‫>‪<ZE‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬

‫‪١٧‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٧‬‬ ‫‪ c‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٩٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻗﺔﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٧١ ،٧٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﺩﻗﺔﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪/‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻗﺔﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪RAW‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪+RAW 1+73‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪Q‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪W‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻇﻞ‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫‪O‬‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٢‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫‪ X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪) *Eye-Fi‬ﺹ ‪(٢٠٨‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٨‬‬ ‫‪ Z‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬
‫‪zxcn‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪g‬‬

‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪< > (AF‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫>‪<Z‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ >‪ <2‬ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫>‪ <A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻮء‬

‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫>‪ <e‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(FP‬‬ ‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL‬‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )‪(D buSY‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٠‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٨‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬
‫‪ : f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٠‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٣‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫‪ : 8‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : 1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٦‬‬

‫‪ : C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٥‬‬

‫‪ :k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٢٣‬‬
‫‪ : 7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٩‬‬
‫‪ : 2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٠‬‬
‫‪ : 3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪ : 4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫‪ :5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫‪ : 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٠ ،٦٩‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٣١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( )ﺹ ‪(٢٣١‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺹ ‪(٢٣١‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( )ﺹ ‪(٢٣١‬‬

‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬

‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٠ ،٦٩‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫‪٢١‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E8‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E8‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﻄﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E8E‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E8‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
 ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭﻩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬
 ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E8‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪LC-E8‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E8E‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LC-E8E‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ )ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﻭﻗﺼﺮ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E8‬‬

‫ﺻﻤﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E8‬ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E8‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٦‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٩‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ >‪ .<f‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ >‪ <2>/<1‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٩‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬ ‫]‪[Recording ...‬‬

‫‪٢٧‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: z‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣ ٍﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪: x‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺪﺭ ٍ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: c‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: n‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E8‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪) CIPA‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ BG-E8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻲ ‪ .LP-E8‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ AA/LR6‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭ*** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٩‬‬

‫‪٢٨‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Date/Time‬‬

‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<a‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<0‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(b‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[OK‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LanguageK‬‬

‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪.[6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [LanguageK‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٠‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [1Release shutter without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺴﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٨‬‬

‫‪٣١‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪"Recording...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪) 0001‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٤٢‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫>‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)‪ ١٤٫٩ × ٢٢٫٣‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٠٫٥٩ × ٠٫٨٨ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪ ٢٤ × ٣٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٠,٩٤ × ١,٤٢ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫‪ ١,٦‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٤‬‬
 ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ُﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ ،(IS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪/EF-S18-55mm f‬‬
‫‪ 3.5-5.6 IS‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<g‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪IS‬‬
‫)ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺘﺎﻥ ‪ 3.5-5.6 IS/EF-S18-200mm f‬ﻭ‪EF-S18-‬‬
‫‪ 3.5-5.6 IS/55mm f‬ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ١٠) E‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬

‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٧‬‬

‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬

‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪.(0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
 ‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻨﺸﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪.(7‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪ ،(C‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٧٠‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٠‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٢‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٨‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ*‬

‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٩٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٩‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٠‬‬ ‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٩‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٦‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫>‪Ð <0‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٩‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪<S‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<0‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪<S‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫* ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪) .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪<U‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١٢‬‬

‫‪٤١‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬

‫>‪ <L‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪Low level‬‬
‫‪) [format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫>‪ ،<X‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٢٤‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.Microsoft‬‬

‫‪٤٣‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٧‬ﻭ‪ (١٤٦‬ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺋﻚ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻤﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫>‪ .<M‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٤‬‬
 ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ً .(٢١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻨﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ba‬‬

‫‪si‬‬
‫‪cZ‬‬
‫‪one‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻪ ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٣‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
 ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫)‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٠٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.(<o‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ (.<o‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻀﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻀﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٣,١/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻇﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ٣,٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻟﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٧‬‬
 ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ( ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ >‪.(<5‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ )ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٨‬‬
 ‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﺮﺯ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٩‬‬
 ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺭﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﻞء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣.٧‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٠‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺯﻫﻮًﺍ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<3‬‬ ‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<6‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٤‬‬

‫‪٥١‬‬
 ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪) <4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﺮﻳﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫>‪ ٠,٢٥) <40.25m/0.8ft‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٠,٨/‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫>‪) <V‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٢‬‬
 ‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺭﺍﻛﻀﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ﻃﻔﻼ‬
‫>‪) <5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٣‬‬
 ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ً‬
‫>‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٤‬‬
 ‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻨﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ >‪) <C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ( ﺑﻜﻞ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ >‪<C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ CA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<C‬‬

‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)‪.(7‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.٥٧-٥٦‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٥‬‬
 ‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫)‪(١‬‬

‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬ ‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬

‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <a‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <D‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <b‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪) <b‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٩‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ" ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٠‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫)ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬

‫)‪ (٤‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ :٧٥‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫>‪) <P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <Q‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <R‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <V‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬

‫>‪) <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣.٧‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫>‪) <Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ" ) ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠٤‬‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٧١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬‫ٍ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪:‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪:‬‬ ‫>‪) <q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٠‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ]‪) [Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٧٤-٧٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٧‬‬
 ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻷﺑﺴﻂ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<x‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<Y‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ )ﺃﻗﺪﻡ( ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<Z‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<B‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٨‬‬
 ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <d‬ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢١٠‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <d‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٩‬‬
 ‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﻀﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬

‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٦٢‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٦٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ، <d‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <I‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪) .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ )‪ ،(30" 3.5‬ﻗﻢ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٦٢‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٦٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ )‪ ،(4000 22‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ>‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ(‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٠‬‬

‫‪٦١‬‬
 ‫‪ :Z‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<Z‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫‪400 - 100‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء‬ ‫‪1600 - 400‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪H ،6400 - 1600‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬

‫]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪) ISO 200 - 6400‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬

‫]‪) [ISO expansion‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) ،[1: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪"H‬‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ً (ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٢‬‬

‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 3200‬‬ ‫‪C/6/5/4/3/7/1‬‬
‫‪١*ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪100 - 6400‬‬ ‫‪8/a/f/s/d‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ISO 100‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪٣*٢*ISO‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪400‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٣‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ >‪ <d‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ >‪ ،<1/C‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO 400 - 1600‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [400‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ ،[800‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٨٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٢٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ١٢٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦٤٠‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻛﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪.٦٤٠٠ - ٤٠٠‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[y‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ISO Auto‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬

‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٦٣‬‬
 ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<d‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ ٦٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠/١ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<D‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪"DbuSY‬‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]‪) [BUSYD‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<D‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫]ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ[‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ / EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫‪٧٫٥ - ٣٫٥ / ٢٫٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪١٢ - ٣٫٥ / ٣٫٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١١ - ٣٫٥ / ٣٫٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪١٧ - ٣٫٥ / ٥٫٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪١٥ - ٣٫٥ / ٤٫٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٢٤ - ٣٫٥ / ٧٫٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪AUTO/٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٢٢ - ٣٫٥ / ٦٫٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٣٤ - ٣٫٥ / ١١ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٨٠٠‬‬
‫‪٣١ - ٣٫٥ / ٩٫٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٤٩ - ٣٫٥ / ١٥ - ١‬‬ ‫‪١٦٠٠‬‬
‫‪٤٣ - ٣٫٥ / ١٣ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٦٩ - ٣٫٥ / ٢١ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٣٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦١ - ٣٫٥ / ١٩ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٩٧ - ٣٫٥ / ٣٠ - ١‬‬ ‫‪٦٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٨٦ - ٣٫٥ / ٢٦ - ١‬‬ ‫‪١٣٨ - ٣٫٥ / ٤٢ - ١‬‬ ‫‪١٢٨٠٠ :H‬‬

‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ٣,٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء >‪.<k> <5> <3> <7‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Red-eye‬‬

‫‪) [reduc.‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٥‬‬
 ‫‪ :E‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<ZE‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‪) [AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪<o‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٨٦‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪ :E‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [1 Beep‬ﺻﻔﻴﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬

‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٦٨‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Servo‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٧‬‬
 ‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻭ>‪ <s‬ﻭ>‪ <f‬ﻭ>‪ ،<a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪،(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻲء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ f/1.0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،f/2.8‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪<o‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٩‬‬
 ‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﻔﻠﻚ ﻭﻫﻮ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻳﺮﻛﺾ ﻧﺤﻮﻙ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<YiQ‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<i‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪.<i‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬
‫• ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﻴﺘﻄﻠﺐ ً‬ ‫ً‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪High‬‬
‫‪) [ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٩٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [2: Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٠‬‬
 ‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<YiQ‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪) 10-sec. self-timer :Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٠٤‬‬
‫‪ :l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪) N‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪ ،<q‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٠٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٤٨‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻘﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<YiQ‬‬

‫‪٧١‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨٫٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Quality‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ )‪ (***M‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)****‪ (****x‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ]***[ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫)‪ ١٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪83‬‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫‪ ٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪74‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫)‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪84‬‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫)‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪86‬‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫‪ ١٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‪***+‬‬ ‫)‪ ١٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪1+73‬‬

‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫* ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫‪ ٢٩٫٧×٤٢) A3‬ﺳﻢ‪ ١١٫٧×١٦٫٥/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪73‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 73‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 83‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.1+73‬‬ ‫‪ ٢١×٢٩٫٧) A4‬ﺳﻢ‪/‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٣×١١٫٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪74‬‬ ‫‪1+73‬‬
‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬
‫‪86‬‬

‫‪ ١٢٫٧×١٧٫٨‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٥٫٠×٧٫٠/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٠×١٤٫٨‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٣٫٩×٥٫٨/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 7‬ﻭ‪8‬؟‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 7‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،8‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﻋﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ؟‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،٩‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ٩‬ﻛـ‬‫ً‬
‫"‪ "9‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪1‬؟‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺣﻮﻝ ‪"1‬‬
‫ﻭ"ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ "1+73‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،1‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﻮ ‪ JPEG‬ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬

‫‪٧٣‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 73‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .1‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪1+73‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 1+73‬ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 73‬ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ JPG‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪ .(CR2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ 73‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪0001 . CR2‬‬ ‫‪1 image‬‬

‫‪0001 . JPG‬‬ ‫‪73 image‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 1+73‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪[7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬‬

‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ]‪) [High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟـ ]‪) [High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٩٣‬ﻭﻫﻲ )‪) (Standard/Low/Strong/Disable‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪/‬ﻗﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٤‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<XA‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪) P Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( )‪ :C‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Q Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( )‪ :C‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٩٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) R Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( )‪ :C‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫>‪.<3‬‬

‫‪٧٥‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬

‫‪) S Neutral‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) U Faithful‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٢٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) V Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )‪ :C‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪ <0‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪) W User Def. 1-3‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪(٣-١‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٩١‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ -‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٦‬‬
 ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ >‪<s‬‬
‫>‪ <8> <a> <f‬ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ ،<8‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ"‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪.٣‬‬

‫‪ c‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬

‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ >‪ <c‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٧‬‬
 ‫‪ :s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬

‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ٣٠/١ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ٢٠٠٠/١ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "‪ "0"5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠,٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ""‪ "15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ٤٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺮﻛﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻹﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ٢٥٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻬﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٥/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٩‬‬
 ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬

‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء )‪ (f-number‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء )‪ (f-number‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(f/5.6 :‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(f/32 :‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )‪ (f-number‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء )‪ (f-number‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء‬
‫)‪ (f-number‬ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء )‪ ،(f-number‬ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء )‪ (f-number‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )‪ (f-number‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺹ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺧﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء )‪ (f-number‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺿﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺎﻕ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ""‪"30‬‬
‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء‬
‫)‪ (f-number‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ "‪ ٤٠٠٠/١) "4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء )‪(f-number‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫‪٨١‬‬
 ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟـ ]‪Flash sync. speed‬‬
‫‪) [in Av mode‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪1: 1/200-1/60‬‬
‫‪) [sec. auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٠/١-٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ])‪ ٢٠٠/١) [2: 1/200 sec. (fixed‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٢‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ( ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٢‬‬

‫‪٨٢‬‬
 ‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻄﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪<6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬ ‫>‪<O> + <6‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬

‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٣‬‬
 ‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪<6‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ >‪) <BULB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻣﺖ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺗﺸﻮﺷﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ً‬

‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪[7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟـ ]‪) [Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ :٢) [2: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٣‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٠٤‬ﻭ‪.(٢٠٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٠٤‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ً‬

‫‪٨٤‬‬
 ‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<8‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫)‪.(0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﻀﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ ""‪ ،"30‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺎﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ "‪ ،"4000‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫>‪ <d‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٥‬‬
 ‫‪ q‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻴﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Metering‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ w‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻌًّﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬

‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٦‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪N‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .(<a‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ‬
‫]‪) [2Exp. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٩‬‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬

‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ >‪ <I‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<J‬‬

‫‪٨٧‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫>‪) <Q‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻨﺸﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪.(7‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]*‪.[y‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[y‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Flash exposure comp.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪ <y‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٠٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [1Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻟـ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash exp comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[2Expo. comp./AEB‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٩‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ‪ ٢±‬ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ (٣/١‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑـ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬ ‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Expo. comp./‬‬
‫‪) [AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٩‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪N‬‬

‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬

‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ >‪) <i‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٧٠‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻷﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AEB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،(<l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ ،<q‬ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٧‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٣‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [2Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AEB‬‬

‫‪٩٠‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٩٣‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Picture Style‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫>‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Detail set.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩١‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ‪ .E‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪،E‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ .F‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،F‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺯﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،G‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﺪﺍﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،H‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺑﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،G‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﺧﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺑﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪،H‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪،G‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪،H‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ( ﻭ]‪[Toning effect‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪) kFilter Effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ(‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :N‬ﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪ :Ye‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫‪ :Or‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ :R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ :G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫‪l‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ(‬
‫]‪) [S:Sepia‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫]‪) [P:Purple‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٣‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫]‪) [User Def. 1‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[User Def. 3‬‬
‫)ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Picture Style‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ*(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Detail set.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٤‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.٩٣-٩١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ )ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *( ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]* ‪[User Def.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ *( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٥‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ sRGB‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Color space‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،Adobe RGB ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.(Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ .(Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪"_MG‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .ICC‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ ICC‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٦‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪N (AE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(0) .<A‬‬

‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٨‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪*q‬‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫‪erw‬‬
‫*ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<D‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(8) .<A‬‬

‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ّ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪ "FEL‬ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<d‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<A‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<D‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬

‫‪٩٨‬‬
 ‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<WB‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪K***) "Approx. ****K‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( )‪ :K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ >‪<Y> <R> <E> <W‬‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬

‫‪٩٩‬‬
 ‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Custom‬‬
‫‪) [White Balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<WB‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <O‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٧٦‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬

‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪) ٪١٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ >‪ .<O‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
 ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WB Shift/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪WB Shift/‬‬
‫‪) [BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪G1 ،A2‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"Shift‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB Shift/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Mired‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :Mired) .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠١‬‬
 ‫‪ :2‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪٣±‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<6‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " "‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ " " )‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ ٣±‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"Bracket‬‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB Shift/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .١ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪ (B‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫)‪ (M‬ﻭ‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪.(G‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ "‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٢‬‬
 ‫ﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪N‬‬
‫‪ُ 3‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto Lighting Optimizer‬‬

‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Auto Lighting‬‬
‫‪) [Optimizer‬ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪Í‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ‬

‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٣‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺿﻮء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪) Professional‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Peripheral illumin. correct.‬‬

‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Peripheral‬‬
‫‪) [illumin. correct.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) [data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬
‫‪) [available‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Enable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬

‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.EOS Utility‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disable‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Correction data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٥‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪N‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺮﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍ ًء ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟـ ]‪) [Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ( ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٥‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ >‪ <l‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RC-6‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪) <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٦‬‬
 ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(١٢٠-١١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ]‪[6Live View function settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Live‬‬
‫‪) [View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫***‬ ‫***‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E8‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) CIPA‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E8‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪.١٢٢-١٢١‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٩‬‬
 ‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫‪) Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEB‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫•‪) : d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫•‪ : c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫•‪ : f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <g‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ ،<g‬ﺩﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ً‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪ <g‬ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ )ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻚ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٠‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<f‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ً (AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١١‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[Live View function settings] [6‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (l ١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،(m ٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.((AE‬‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١١٣‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[u Live mode‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٨‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ >‪ .<x‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [yDust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [6Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻼ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<d‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪<8‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪5Auto power‬‬
‫‪) [off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٣٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٦٧‬ﻭ‪.(١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٠٤‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﻭ]‪u Live‬‬
‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١١٤‬ﻭ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٠‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ]‪[6Live View function settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[AF mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪d :‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ > < ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬

‫‪١١٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬

‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪c :‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪<q‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<f‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<p‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <p‬ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<L‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١١٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<L‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ( ‪.u‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <p‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ < > (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬

‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺯﻣ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪f :‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٦٦‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N .(AF‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻀﻲء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٩‬‬
 ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬

‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<u‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬

‫‪١٢٠‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [6LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<E‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ >‪ <E‬ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢١‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٣‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [2Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ً‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩١‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (FE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٢‬‬
 ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<k‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ‪.MOV‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫"‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦‬ﻟـ ‪" SD‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Full HD 1080‬‬

‫ﺗﺪﻝ ‪ Full HD 1080‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻎ ﻋﺪﺩﻫﺎ ‪) ١٠٨٠‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٣‬‬
 ‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٦٧‬ﻭ‪.(١٦٩‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.(١٢٠-١١٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <A‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪"o‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻭ‪.١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﻭ‪.١٢٢‬‬

‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [n Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٣١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ً‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <A‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٩٧‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ ،<6‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٢٦‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻗﻄﺮ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) IN‬ﺩﺧﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E8‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ** :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﻳﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ** :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٥‬‬
 ‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ*‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫•‪ : d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪ :L‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫•‪ : c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪ :K‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫•‪ : f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫* ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Movie exposure‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[o‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Movie‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) [exposure‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫>‪<6‬‬
‫>‪<O> + <6‬‬
‫>‪.<z‬‬
‫‪ ٤٠٠٠/١ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٦٠/١ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‪x / y‬‬
‫•‪ ٤٠٠٠/١ : u / v / w‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٠/١ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻄﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Z‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫>‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO 100 - 6400 :ISO‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO 100 - 6400 :ISO‬‬

‫‪١٢٧‬‬
 ‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺑـ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٤‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒًﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢٥/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٧٣‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ (Exif‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [1Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪١٢٩‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<f‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ً (AF‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ [n‬ﻭ]‪ [o‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[n‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ]****‪ [****x‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪) [z‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ‪) z‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Movie rec. size‬ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [6Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬
‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) Full HD‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[1920x1080‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) HD‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[1280x720‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٤:٣‬‬ ‫]‪[640x480‬‬
‫]‪ : [Crop 640x480‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪ (٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬ﻭﺳﺘﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫]‪ : [w] [y‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ ‪) NTSC‬ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫]‪ : [v] [x‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻫﻮ ‪) PAL‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[u‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻔﻲ‬
‫]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﻧﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫*** ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫*** ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫]‪[1920x1080‬‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫]‪[1280x720‬‬
‫‪x‬‬

‫*** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪y‬‬

‫*** ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫]‪[640x480‬‬
‫*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫‪x‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ٢ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫]‪ [1920×1080‬ﻭ‪ ١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ]‪ [1280×720‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠٠٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ]‪.[640×480‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .١١٩-١١٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ‪k‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪k‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <w‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫• ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ .(AE‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<w‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<w‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ ،(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<w‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC6‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٠٤‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <o‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٣‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[o‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Movie exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،(2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.((AE‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IN‬‬
‫)ﺩﺧﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٦‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪k‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Movie exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ ٪١٨‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ISO 200‬ﻭ‪ .6400‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬

‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٤‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﺘﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ( ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪) IN‬ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٢٦‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺫﻭ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ( ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٥‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻧﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﻧﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ً‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٦٧‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ]‪ [1920×1080‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[1280×720‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٦٧‬ﻭ‪ (١٦٩‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٦‬‬
 ‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥٣‬‬

‫‪١٣٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Beep‬ﺻﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Release shutter‬‬
‫‪) [without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "Card‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Off‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﺪﺓ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Image review‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫>‪ <x> <B> <M‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<B‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto power off‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LCD brightness‬‬

‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<U‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٩‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9999‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.IMG_0001.JPG :‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫]‪) [Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .9999‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0001‬ﻭ‪ 9999‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪Card-1‬‬ ‫‪Card-2‬‬

‫‪0051‬‬ ‫‪0052‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫]‪) [Auto reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ .0001‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،0001‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪Card-1‬‬ ‫‪Card-2‬‬

‫‪0051‬‬ ‫‪0001‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫]‪) [Manual reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ 0001‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪.0001‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺲ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 999‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،9999‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪ ."IMG‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑـ "_‪ ."MVI‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "‪ ".JPG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ"‪ ".CR2‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﻭ"‪ ".MOV‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬

‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫]‪) [OnPD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ : (PD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [OnD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(D‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [OnPD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،(PD‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫"ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[OnD‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(D‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [OnPD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (PD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ B‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<B‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫‪/‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺑﻴﺾ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٤٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٩‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٨‬‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٣٩‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥٠‬‬

‫‪١٤٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <d‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear settings‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪[Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) Automatic selection‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪AF point selection‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Auto Lighting Optimizer‬‬ ‫‪) q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫‪Metering mode‬‬
‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻳﺔ(‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪/‬‬ ‫‪) AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪) ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪Peripheral illumination‬‬
‫‪Correction data‬‬ ‫‪) u‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫‪) Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪) retained‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ(‬ ‫‪Exposure compensation/‬‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬ ‫‪) AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫‪sRGB‬‬ ‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪) Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪Flash exposure‬‬
‫‪) WB correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪) compensation‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪) Custom Functions‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬ ‫‪) Unchanged‬ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‬ ‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) Erased‬ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫‪) Live View shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪) Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪ ٣٠) 30 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ ١٦) 16 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪Release shutter without‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪) card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫‪) Image review‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪ ٢) 2 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪) Histogram‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ( ‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫‪) Movie- recording size‬ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫‪١٩٢٠×١٠٨٠‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠) images ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‬ ‫‪Image jump w/6‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪OnzD‬‬ ‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪) LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪k‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫‪) AF/AE lock‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪) Unchanged‬ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ(‬ ‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪ k‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪) Unchanged‬ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ(‬ ‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫‪) Remote control‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Unchanged‬ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ(‬ ‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‬
‫‪) Movie exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪Copyright information‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫‪) Unchanged‬ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ(‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪) Eye-Fi transmission‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٦) 16 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫‪(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Sound recording‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪) My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ‪) Unchanged‬ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ(‬

‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪Highlight tone priority k‬‬

‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬

‫‪١٤٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬

‫ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LCD auto off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪LCD auto‬‬
‫‪) [off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Screen color‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Screen color‬‬
‫)ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٦‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]*** ‪) [External flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ***( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻻ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬

‫ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪External flash func.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ً‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Built-in flash func. setting‬‬

‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪External flash‬‬
‫‪) [func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻫﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٧‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬
‫]‪External flash‬‬ ‫]‪Built-in flash‬‬
‫‪[func. setting‬‬ ‫‪[func. setting‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪) E-TTL II‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‬ ‫‪) Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪) Shutter sync.‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬
‫–‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪) *FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪Flash exposure compensation‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫–‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪) *Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫–‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪) *Wireless setting‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪) [Zoom‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﻭ]‪[Wireless set.‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1st curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2nd curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Hi-speed‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٨‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[External flash C.Fn setting‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<U‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear ext. flash C.Fn set.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬

‫‪١٤٩‬‬
 ‫‪f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺮﻋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ ‪.(f‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﻣ ً‬
‫ُﻌﻄﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ (f‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫>‪.<2‬‬

‫‪١٥٠‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﺼﺎ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻀﺮ ﺟﺴﻤًﺎ ً‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[y‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Dust Delete‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) [Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥١‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)‪ ٠٫٧‬ﻗﺪﻡ ‪ ١ -‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﻜﻼ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.f/22‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥٢‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E8‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA/LR6‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥٣‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬‫ً‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫‪١٥٤‬‬
 ‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﺣﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻫﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
 ‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<x‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<I‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪Î‬‬ ‫‪Î‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[4Image jump w/6‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،(4‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ]‪1 image‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ١٠) 10 images/‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٠) 100 images‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‪) Date/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) Movies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪) Stills/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ([‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪.<V‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( ﻭ]‪) [Stills‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
 ‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١,٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<u‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<x‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
 ‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪°٠→ °٢٧٠ → °٩٠ :‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [5Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(zD‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٤٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫]‪) [5Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(zD‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
 ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٦٩ ،١٦٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )‪ (Full HD: 1920x1080‬ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪ (HD: 1280x720‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MOV‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪(١٦٦-١٦٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻞ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬

‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ PDF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬‬
‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ ،ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.PDF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .MOV‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦١‬‬
 ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <1s‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﻘﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ .<U‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٤‬‬ ‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ''‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ' ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٦٢‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫>‪.<6‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E8‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٧٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ ** :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٦٧‬ﻭ‪ (١٦٩‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬

‫‪١٦٣‬‬
 ‫‪ X‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[X‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]‪) [U‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪[V‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ .<0‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [7‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[W‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Overwrite‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ(‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑـ ]‪ ،([X‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [New file‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ZoomBrowser EX/‬‬
‫‪) ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
 ‫‪3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [ Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Slide show‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬

‫>‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪jAll] :‬‬
‫‪) images‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪) iDate/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) kMovies‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪) zStills/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ([‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [iDate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪.<zH>.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Select date‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬

‫‪ jAll images‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫)ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪) iDate‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪kMovies‬‬

‫)ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬

‫‪) zStills‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬

‫‪١٦٥‬‬
 ‫‪3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Set up‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ]‪Display‬‬
‫‪) [time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭ]‪) [Repeat‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫]‪) [Repeat‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬ ‫]‪) [Display time‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Start‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫)ﺑﺪء(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[ Loading image...‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،(...‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬

‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ >‪.<6‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ ١٦٧‬ﻭ‪.١٦٩‬‬

‫‪١٦٦‬‬
 ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪) HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬

‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <dHDMI MINI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<D‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦٢‬‬

‫‪١٦٧‬‬
 ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﻦ >‪ <q/C‬ﻭ>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ٍ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪HDMI CEC‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ *HDMI CEC‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.(HDMI‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Ctrl over HDMI‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،(HDMI‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ >‪ <x‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ←‪ →/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ←‪ →/‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ↓‪ ↑/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) Enter‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Return‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Enter‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ←‪→/‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ً HDMI CEC‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،HDMI CEC‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) HD‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪ <q/C‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<q/C‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫)ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬

‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦٢‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [6Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦٩‬‬
 ‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Protect‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<K‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<M‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬

‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٧٢‬ﻓﺴﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
 ‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 73+1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪.JPEG‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Erase‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) [images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬

‫‪١٧١‬‬
 ‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select and erase images‬‬

‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select and erase images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫>‪.<V‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[3Erase images‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬

‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٢‬‬

‫‪١٧٢‬‬
 ‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫* ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،73+1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.73‬‬

‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ >‪ < /k‬ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ >‪ <D‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫>‪ <A/B/C‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ >‪ .<u/v/w/x/y‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<G‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٣‬‬
 ‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ‬

‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4Histogram‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺭﺳﻤًﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴًﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٤‬‬
 ‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٧٦‬‬

‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٨٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪q/‬‬
‫‪ <C‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬

‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬
‫‪٦w‬‬ ‫‪PictBridge‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬

‫ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Bubble Jet Direct‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻃﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٤‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ( ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E8‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٧‬‬
 ‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫* ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪ Q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Y‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ U‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪Bordered‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫‪Borderless‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪Borderedc‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠) 20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫)‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪) Letter‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٥‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥) 35-upp‬ﺻﻮﺭ • ]‪ ٢٠) [20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪) Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬

‫‪١٧٩‬‬
 ‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ )ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<e‬‬
‫>‪ ،<z‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) EOn‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬

‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) EOff‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬

‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) EEVIVID‬ﺯﺍﻩٍ(‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) ENR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‬

‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) B/W 0‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪Cool tone 0‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ Warm tone 0‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ(‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪) zNatural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪"Natural‬‬
‫‪zNatural M‬‬
‫)ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪،‬‬
‫)ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪EDefault‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٨٢‬‬

‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <R‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<l‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﻫﻮ ‪.١‬‬
‫)ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪ (.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٨٣‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨١‬‬
 ‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،١٨٠‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <e‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ >‪،<z‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬

‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٢٥٥‬‬
‫‪) kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﻥ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [Red-eye corr.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ .<S‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪Tilt correction‬‬

‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٠,٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ .<6‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <O‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨٣‬‬
 ‫‪w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪[Continue‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Paper Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫‪) Ink Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Hardware Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) File Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨٤‬‬
 ‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫)ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬ ‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬

‫‪١٨٥‬‬
 ‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬

‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪K‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪Print type‬‬
‫‪K‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪File number‬‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<7‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ ]‪All‬‬
‫‪) [image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.RAW‬‬

‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪[File No.‬‬
‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨٦‬‬
‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬

‫‪) Print Ordering‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬

‫‪) Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ .<I‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬

‫]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ >‪ <X‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫‪) All image‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Mark all on card‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Clear‬‬
‫‪) [all on card‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨٧‬‬
 ‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .١٧٦‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫]ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٧٨‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (١٨٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪[Resume‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٨٤‬‬

‫‪١٨٨‬‬
 ‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪ne‬‬
‫‪Zo‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪iv‬‬
‫‪at‬‬
‫‪Cre‬‬

‫‪١٨٩‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪[Custom Functions (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Custom‬‬
‫)‪) [Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [7Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪[Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤٤‬‬

‫‪١٩٠‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪C.Fn I: Exposure‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩٢‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫* ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) C.Fn I -1‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ (١ - ١‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪) C.Fn II: Image‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩٣‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩٤‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬

‫‪C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive‬‬

‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬

‫‪C.Fn IV: Operation/Others‬‬

‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ(‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩٥‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩٦‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٩٧‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪١٢‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )‪) .(LV‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪(.‬‬

‫‪١٩١‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪) C.Fn I: Exposure‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١/٣ :٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ ١/٢ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪) ISO expansion‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :2‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺳﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "H‬ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO 12800‬‬
‫)‪Flash sync. speed in Av (Aperture-priority AE‬‬ ‫‪C.Fn-3‬‬
‫‪) mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 1/200-1/60 sec. auto :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٠/١-٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠/١) 1/200 sec. (fixed) :٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ((‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻤﻨﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ .١‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪١٩٢‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،٢‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪) Long exposure noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪C.Fn-4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ً‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫"‪) "BUSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬

‫‪) High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪C.Fn-5‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٥‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Standard :٠‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬
‫‪) Low :١‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬
‫‪) Strong :٢‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫‪) Disable :٣‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٣‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫‪) Highlight tone priority‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٦‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬ ‫‪C.Fn-6‬‬

‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ ٪١٨‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠٣‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﻟﻤ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٦٤٠٠‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫‪) AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٧‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬ ‫‪C.Fn-7‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.EOS‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlites‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ]‪) [AF-assist beam firing‬ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ EOS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪) [Disabled‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٣/٢/٠-٧‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٤‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫‪) Mirror lockup‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٨‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ(‬ ‫‪C.Fn-8‬‬

‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٠٦‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫‪) Shutter/AE lock button‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٩‬ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪C.Fn-9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) AF/AE lock‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪:٠‬‬
‫‪) AE lock/AF‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪:١‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<A‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.(AE‬‬
‫‪) AF/AF lock, no AE lock‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪:٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <A‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AE/AF, no AE lock‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪:٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AI‬‬
‫‪) Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .AI Servo‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٠٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٥‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫‪) Assign SET button‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١٠‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬ ‫‪C.Fn-10‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ‪(SET‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :٣‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬
‫‪ :٤‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬
‫‪ :٥‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Z‬‬
‫‪) LCD display when power ON‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫‪C.Fn-11‬‬
‫‪ :١١‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٦‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫‪) Add image verification data‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪C.Fn-12‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪:١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪ :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(١٧٣‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<L‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪OSK-E3‬‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪.OSK-E3‬‬

‫‪١٩٧‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪N‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪My Menu‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register to My Menu‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register to My Menu‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<M‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‬

‫ﻓﺮﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪) [Delete item/items] .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪/‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪) [Delete all items‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ً [9‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٨‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Copyright information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Copyright‬‬
‫‪) [information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Enter‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪) [author’s name‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪) [Enter copyright details‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[.Display copyright info‬‬
‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Delete copyright information‬‬
‫)ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٩‬‬
 ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬

‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <Q‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠٠‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٤٤‬‬
‫‪ Q‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٤٥‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٤٧‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٤٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ - - - - - - - - - - - (AE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪ - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ :E‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ - - - - - - - - - - - (AF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥١‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ - - - - - - - - - - - -(AF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥١‬‬
‫‪ :Z‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ISO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٢‬‬
‫‪ i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٢‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٣‬‬
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٥‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ‪ - - - - - EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٧‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٥٨‬‬

‫‪٢٤٣‬‬
 ‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬

‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠١‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﺠﺎﺯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ (<o‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫)‪ (١‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٨‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣُﻀﺎﻋﻒ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ f/5.6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ /f‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ .(u‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ،u‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١٧‬‬

‫‪٢٠٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ACK-E8‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫‪٢٠٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) RC-6‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦٫٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <Q‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧١‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) RC-1/RC-5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬

‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٢٫٠/‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠٥‬‬
 ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ً‬
‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Macro Lites‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(١٤٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪[E-TTL II meter.‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ (E-TTL II‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ،EX‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Shutter sync.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ((‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ y‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ‪ EZ/E/EG/ML/TL‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A-TTL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪Canon‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺼﻨّﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) .Eye-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣١‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Eye-Fi settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Eye-Fi settings‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،(Eye-Fi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Eye-Fi trans.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫)ﻧﻘﻞ ‪ (Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Connection info.‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Access point SSID:‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ )‪ (SSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.(:‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪Access‬‬
‫‪) [point SSID:‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ (SSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.(:‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫‪ Eye-Fi card‬ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪."H‬‬

‫‪) H‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) H‬ﻭﺍﻣﺾ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) H‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ( ) H‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬

‫( ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪)J‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪ :(2) I‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬

‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Eye-Fi trans.‬ﻧﻘﻞ ‪ (Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠٩‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ :o‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪a fs d C 6 5 4 3 2 7 1‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪Stills‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪RAW‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪RAW + 73‬‬

‫‪ISO speed‬‬
‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪o‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬
‫‪) Custom WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‬
‫‪WB correction‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﻣ ِّ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k Peripheral illumination‬‬ ‫‪correction‬‬
‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Long exposure noise reduction‬‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ(‬

‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪AI Servo‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪AI Focus‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫)‪ (AF‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫)‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬

‫‪٢١٠‬‬
 ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪a fs d C 6 5 4 3 2 7 1‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪*k‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫*‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪compensation‬‬
‫‪*k‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬

‫‪Stills‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫*‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟ ُﻤ َﻮِّﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫*‪٣‬‬ ‫‪Flash exposure compensation‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬

‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪sRGB‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬

‫‪Live View shooting‬‬
‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٢‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ")‪ (٢‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٦٥‬‬
‫*‪ :٣‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ")‪ (٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٦٥‬‬
‫*‪ :٤‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :٥‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Remote control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢١١‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬ ‫‪1 / 37+1 / 68 / 67 / 48 / 47 / 38 / 37‬‬ ‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬ ‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪Release shutter‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬ ‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪without card‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪8 sec. /‬‬
‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) 2 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ( ‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec. /‬‬ ‫‪Image review‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪) Hold /‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬
‫)‪ٍ ٨‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪Peripheral illumination‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬ ‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Red-eye reduction‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫)ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬
‫‪) Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪Built-in flash function setting /‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ‪External flash function setting /‬‬
‫‪) Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ‪External flash C.Fn setting /‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ‪Clear external flash /‬‬
‫‪) C.Fn setting‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬

‫‪) 1/3-stop increments Exposure compensation/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‪±5 stops ،‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬ ‫‪) AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ٥±) /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( )‪) AEB: ±2 stops‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺘﺎﻥ((‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪) Disable Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Low /‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ‪) Standard /‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫‪) Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬ ‫ُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫)ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫‪Metering mode‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬ ‫‪e/r/w/q‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪Custom White Balance‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬ ‫‪ :WB correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪) WB Shift/BKT‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪ :WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬ ‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪sRGB / Adobe RGB‬‬

‫‪٧٥‬‬ ‫‪) PStandard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ‪) QPortrait /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ(‬

‫‪٩١‬‬ ‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪) RLandscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪) SNeutral /‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬ ‫‪) UFaithful‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ‪) VMonochrome /‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) WUser Def. 1, 2, 3‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣ ،٢ ،١‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ )ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ( ]‪ [2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ]‪ [y‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ]‪ [7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭ]‪ [9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ٣‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬

‫‪Dust Delete Data‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠٠) Max. 400‬ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( ‪ ٨٠٠) Max. 800 /‬ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫‪ ١٦٠٠) Max. 1600‬ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( ‪ ٣٢٠٠) Max. 3200 /‬ﻛﺤﺪ‬ ‫‪ ISO) ISO Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ( ‪ ٦٤٠٠) Max. 6400 /‬ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬

‫‪Protect images‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬ ‫‪) Erase-protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ(‬
‫)ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬ ‫‪) Rotate vertical images‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪) Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬ ‫‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬
‫)‪) Specify images to be printed (DPOF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١٨٥‬‬ ‫‪) Print order‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )‪((DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬ ‫‪) Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬

‫‪) Histogram‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬ ‫‪) Brightness / RGB‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪(RGB /‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‬
‫‪) 1 image‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪ ١٠) 10 images /‬ﺻﻮﺭ( ‪/‬‬ ‫‪/Image jump w‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠٠) 100 images‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ‪) Date /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ‪Movies /‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪) Stills /‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ( ‪6‬‬
‫‪) Ctrl over HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻋﺒﺮ ‪(HDMI‬‬

‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬

‫‪ ٣٠) 30 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪) 1 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪2 min. /‬‬
‫‪Auto power off‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬ ‫)ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ( ‪ ٤) 4 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪ ٨) 8 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪/‬‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪ ١٥) 15 min.‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬ ‫‪) On‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) On / (PD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Off / (D‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪) Format‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ(‬
‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ( ‪) Auto reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪/‬‬ ‫‪File numbering‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫‪) Manual reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪) LCD auto off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬ ‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪) Screen color‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫‪) Eye-Fi transmission‬ﻧﻘﻞ ‪) Disable :(Eye-Fi‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪/‬‬ ‫* ‪Eye-Fi settings‬‬
‫‪٢٠٨‬‬
‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Connection information /‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(Eye-Fi‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢١٣‬‬
 ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬

‫‪LCD brightness‬‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪،‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬ ‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬ ‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪NTSC / PAL‬‬
‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) Enable :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪Sensor cleaning‬‬
‫‪) Clean now‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ(‬ ‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬ ‫‪) Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪) Live View shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ‪/‬‬ ‫‪Live View function‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬ ‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ‪) Metering timer /‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪) settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪) AF mode /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬

‫‪7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٣‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬

‫)‪Custom Functions(C.Fn‬‬
‫‪١٩٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪) Display copyright information‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ‪) Enter author’s name /‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻟﻒ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪Copyright information‬‬
‫‪١٩٩‬‬ ‫‪) Enter copyright details‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ‪/‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‬
‫‪) Delete copyright information‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ(‬
‫‪) Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪Clear settings‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬ ‫)‪) Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬
‫‪) Firmware Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫–‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‬

‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬

‫‪My Menu settings‬‬
‫‪١٨٩‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬

‫‪٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪) ١‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪/ (u / v / w) ١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬
‫‪/ (x / y) ٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫‪Movie recording size‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪/ (x / y) ٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪) Crop 640x480‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪(x / y) (٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪) Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ‪) u Live mode /‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ( ‪) Quick mode /‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬

‫‪١٣٢‬‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪) AF during k‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪(k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪/‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ o‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪) ٢‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪Movie exposure‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬ ‫‪) Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪) Manual /‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬ ‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) Grid 1l /‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Grid 2m /(١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪ ١٦) 16 sec. /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪30 sec. /‬‬
‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec.‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪) 1 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪ ١٠) 10 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪/‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪ ٣٠) 30 min.‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬
‫‪Sound recording‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬ ‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬

‫‪١٣٤‬‬ ‫‪) Disable kHighlight tone priority‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬

‫)ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(*‬
‫*ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Movie exposure‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ )ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ( ]‪ [n‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻭ]‪ [o‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ )ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ( ]‪ [y‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ]‪ [7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ]‪ [9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺳﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ]‪) [Exposure comp.‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[1‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫• ]‪ :[2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫• ]‪ :[5‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ]‪ :[6‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪٢١٥‬‬
 ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪RC-6‬‬ ‫‪RS-60E3‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-S‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬

‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬

‫‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬

‫‪Solution Disk‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IFC-200U/500U‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪Windows 7‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬
‫‪Windows XP‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪Mac OS X‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪OSK-E3‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪/SD‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪/SDHC‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪PCMCIA‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬

‫‪٢١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬

‫‪ST-E2‬‬ ‫‪270EX‬‬ ‫‪430EX II‬‬ ‫‪580EX II‬‬ ‫‪Macro Ring Lite‬‬ ‫‪Macro Twin Lite‬‬
‫‪MR-14EX‬‬ ‫‪MT-24EX‬‬

‫ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫‪EP-EX15ll‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ‪Ef‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪E‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪EW-100DB lll‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ‪Ef‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪C‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫‪ACK-E8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪LP-E8‬‬ ‫‪ LC-E8‬ﺃﻭ‪LC-E8E‬‬
‫‪EH19-L‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪DR-E8‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪CA-PS700‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ BGM-E8L‬ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪ BGM-E8A‬ﻟـ‬
‫‪BG-E8‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E8‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪AA/LR6‬‬

‫‪٢١٧‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E8‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٤‬‬

‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬

‫‪٢١٨‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺘﺎ ‪ ١٠٧‬ﻭ‪،(١٢٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧١ ،٣١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٩ ،٣٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) Write/Erase‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٣٦‬ﻭ‪.(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫‪٢١٩‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٤٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٢٢٤‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ]‪High ISO‬‬
‫‪) [speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Standard‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Low‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Strong‬‬
‫)ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺣﻘﻞ ﻋﺸﺒﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٢‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪.ISO 100‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ .ISO 100‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO 100‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٩٤‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٤‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٩٤‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٤‬‬

‫ﺑﻂء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <f‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻟﻴﻼ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ( ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪[7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ]‪) [Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ٢‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩٢‬‬

‫‪٢٢٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٠٩‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬
‫" ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪" 6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣٥‬‬

‫‪٢٢١‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٠‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٧٠‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ )"_‪.("_MG‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .sRGB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩٦‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ‪.0001‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤٠‬‬

‫‪٢٢٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﻴﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٩‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٦٧‬ﻭ‪.(١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٦٩‬‬

‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻘﻢ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.SDHC‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.SDXC‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨٠‬‬

‫‪٢٢٣‬‬
 ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬

‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬

‫‪Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the‬‬
‫‪) lens contacts.‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪٠١‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪Canon‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ١٣‬ﻭ‪.(١٦‬‬
‫‪Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card‬‬
‫‪) with camera.‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪٠٢‬‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٣١‬ﻭ‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫‪) Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card.‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪٠٤‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ٣١‬ﻭ‪ ١٧١‬ﻭ‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫‪The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on‬‬
‫‪) again.‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪٠٥‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on again.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪٠٦‬‬
‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٧‬‬
‫‪Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and‬‬
‫‪) on again or re-install the battery. ،٢٠ ،١٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ‬
‫‪ ،٤٠ ،٣٠‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪،٦٠ ،٥٠‬‬
‫‪ Í ٨٠ ،٧٠‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫‪) Canon‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٧‬ﻭ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺠﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫‪٢٢٤‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AF/AE‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪SDXC‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٤٫٩ × ٢٢٫٣‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪(EF-S‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٫٦‬ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪CMOS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٫٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢:٣‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٫٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪) RAW ،JPEG‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ١٤‬ﺑﺖ(‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ JPEG+RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٣٤٥٦ × ٥١٨٤‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ٨٫٠٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٢٣٠٤ × ٣٤٥٦‬‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(١٧٢٨ × ٢٥٩٢‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ١٧٫٩٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٣٤٥٦ × ٥١٨٤‬‬ ‫‪RAW‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٣ - ١‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫* ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢٢٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺁﺓ ﺧﻤﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٩٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٨٧‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ١-‬ﻡ‪ ١-‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١-‬ﻡ (‬
‫‪١-‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪ ١٫٠+ - ٣٫٠-‬ﻡ‪(dpt) ١-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪:‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ٩ :(AF‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪) EV -0.5 - 18‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،AI Servo‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Focus‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪:(AF‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪ TTL‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٦٣‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ )ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪((AF‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ )** ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )** ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫‪) EV 1 - 20‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO 100 - 3200‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 6400‬ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪6400‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ISO 12800‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ٥± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪:(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬

‫‪٢٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ١٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،ISO 100) ٤٣/١٣ :‬ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻛﻤﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١/٢‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ :(FE‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻭ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٧‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ *** :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪ *** :RAW‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ JPEG+RAW‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ *** :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫* ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑـ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO 100‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٠/٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪:‬‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢٢٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪MOV‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪) ١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠ :‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ( ‪24p/25p/30p :‬‬
‫‪60p/50p :‬‬ ‫‪) ٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪50p/60p :‬‬ ‫‪) ٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪) ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ‪50p/60p :‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً ٢٥٫٠٠ :25p ،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫* ‪ً ٢٩٫٩٧ :30p‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ً ٥٩٫٩٤ :60p ،‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ً ٢٣٫٩٧٦ :24p‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠٫٠٠ :50p‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠ : (24p/25p/30p) ١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣٣٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪(50p/60p) ٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪ ١٦٥ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪(50p/60p) ٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ‪ *** : (50p/60p) ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ °٧٣/‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪:‬‬
‫‪(ISO 100 ،EF50mm f/1.4 USM‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 6400‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) 6400 - 100‬ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪ ١٫٠٤‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )‪ ٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ١٠ - ١٫٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DPOF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٫١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪/(NTSC/PAL‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) C‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪CEC‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﻄﺮ ‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RS-60E3‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪RC-6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E8‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ‪(١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ACK-E8‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ BG-E8‬ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪AA/LR6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪:‬‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫*** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪٢٢٩‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٧٥٫٣ × ٩٧٫٥ × ١٢٨٫٨ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٠ × ٣٫٨ × ٥٫١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٥٣٠‬ﺟﻢ‪ ١٧٫٧ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺺ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪(CIPA‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤٧٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ١٦٫٨ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺺ )ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ ١٠٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E8‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٧٫٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١١٢٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ٦ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ٠ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪-‬‬
‫‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٥٥٫٢ × ١٥٫٤ × ٣٧٫١ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٢ × ٠٫٦ × ١٫٥ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫** ﺟﻢ ‪ ** /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺺ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E8‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٧٢٠/‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ١٠٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٨٧٫٥ × ٢٨ × ٦٩ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٫٤ × ١٫١ × ٢٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫** ﺟﻢ ‪ ** /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺺ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E8E‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٧٢٠/‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ١٠٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ *** × *** × *** :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ *** × *** × *** /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬
‫** ﺟﻢ ‪ ** /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺺ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ‪EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪'٥٠°٢٧ - '٢٠°٧٤ :‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪'٢٠°٢٣ - '٣٠°٦٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪'٤٠°١٥ - '٣٠°٤٥ :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٢٥‬ﻡ ‪ ٠٫٨٢ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻠﺲ(‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣٤‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤٥ × ٦٧ - ١٣٤ × ٢٠٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ١٫٨ × ٢٫٦ - ٥٫٣ × ٨٫١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٠٫٢٥‬ﻡ ‪ ٠٫٨٢ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪:‬‬
‫‪E-58‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٧٠ × ٦٨٫٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢٫٨ × ٢٫٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٧٫١ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪) EW-60C‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫‪) LP814‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪EF-S18135-mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪'٣٠°١١ - '٢٠°٧٤ :‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪'٣٠°٩ - '٣٠°٦٤ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪'٢٠°٦ - '٣٠°٤٥ :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬‫ً‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ٠٫٤٩ :‬ﻣﺘﺮ ‪ ١٫٦١ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ*‪:‬‬
‫)‪ ٥٠٣ × ٣٢٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ١٩٫٨ × ١٢٫٩ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ٠٫٤٥ :‬ﻣﺘﺮ ‪ ١٫٤٨ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪ ١١٢ × ٧٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤٫٤ × ٣٫٠ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ(‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٢١‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ١٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٦٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪E-67U‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ١٠١ × ٧٥٫٤‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤٫٠ × ٣٫٠ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤٥٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ١٦٫٠ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺺ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪) EW-73B‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬
‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣُﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٣١‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ Adobe‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Adobe Systems Incorporated‬‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.LLC ،SD-3C‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ٢٫٠‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Exif 2.21‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ .("Exif Print‬ﻭ‪ Exif Print‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،Exif Print‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪MPEG-4‬‬

‫"ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (١‬ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴًﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪".MPEG-4‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .MPEG-4‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪) Canon‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٣٢‬‬
 ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‬

‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣٌﻌﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ )‪ .(- +‬ﻻ ﺗﻤﺰﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٤‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﻠﻊ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻌﺎء‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻼﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗُﺼﺎﺏ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﻻﻣﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻜﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٣٣‬‬
 ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ّ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ٍ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ )ﺛﻨﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ‬

‫‪٢٣٤‬‬
 ‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪DS126271‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻃﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﻟّﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫— ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫— ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺏ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(FCC‬‬
‫ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Canon U.S.A. Inc.‬‬
‫‪One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ‪(٥١٦) ٣٢٨ -٥٦٠٠ :‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ICES-003‬ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ ACK-E8‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪ ٧٫٤ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٣٥‬‬
 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ — ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LC-E8‬ﻭ‪.LC-E8E‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ )‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪(٢) ،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ (٣) ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ — ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ .LP-E8‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻌﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﻴﻦ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺂﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ 1-800-8-BATTERY‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬

‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺮﻛﻠﻮﺭﻳﺖ – ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٣٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪١٤٤ ...............‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪٢١٤ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪٧٨ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٨٠ ...........‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪٢٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٧٨ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪١٤١ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٧ - ٣٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣١ .......................................٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪١٣١ .....................................١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬
‫‪١٣١ ........................................ ٤٨٠×٦٤٠‬‬
‫‪) A-DEP‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٨٥ ............................... (AE‬‬
‫‪٩٦ .....................................Adobe RGB‬‬
‫‪) AI FOCUS‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٧ ............................ (AI Focus‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪٢٠ ............................‬‬ ‫‪) AI SERVO‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٧ .............................(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٢٠ ............................‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪٨٠ ....‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪١٩٤ ،٦٢ .........................‬‬
‫‪) C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ( ‪٥٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪١٩٤ .................................‬‬
‫‪) HDMI CEC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٣٩ ،٢٧ .......................‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ‪١٦٨ ............‬‬
‫ﺏ‬ ‫‪١٦٧ ،١٦٠ .....................................HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٦٠ .............................‬‬ ‫‪٧٤ - ٧٢ ............................. JPEG+RAW‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٦١ ..................................‬‬ ‫‪٧٢ .............................................. JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ → ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪) M‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ‪٨٣ ................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢٠٨ .................................... Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫‪) MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪١٢٠ ،٦٩ ................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ → SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪٢١٤ ،١٣١ .................................... NTSC‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ → ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪) ONE SHOT‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٣١ ،١٣ ،٢ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪٦٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٣٨ ،٣١ .........................‬‬ ‫‪) P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪٦٠ .......................‬‬
‫‪٢٠٨ ......................................Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫‪٢١٤ ،١٣١ ....................................... PAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪٤٢ ...........................................‬‬
‫‪١٧٥ ..................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪٢٢٤ ،٣٢ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٢٣ ........................SD‬‬ ‫‪) Q‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( ‪٣٨ ..................................‬‬
‫‪٢ ...............................SDHC/SDXC‬‬ ‫‪٧٤ - ٧٢ .........................................RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٩٣ ...........................‬‬ ‫‪٩٦ .............................................. sRGB‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٩٧ ........................‬‬ ‫‪) Tv‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪٧٨ ...........‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ‪١٥١ ................................‬‬ ‫‪ → WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪٩٣ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٧٦ ...........................‬‬

‫‪٢٣٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ )ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪١٥٠ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٩٣ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٥٣ ،١٥٠ ،٢٧ ....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٢٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٨٣ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪٩٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪٤٢ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪٩٨ ......................... (FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪٤٣ ،٤٢ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪١٣٤ ،١١٢ ،٩٧ ...... (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٩ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٤٨ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪١٠٢ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪٣٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪١٠١ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٢٣٣ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪٩٩ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪١٠٠ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٣١ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٥٩ ،١٤٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪١٣٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪٢١٠ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٧٢ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٠٤ .................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪١٠٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٧٣ ،١٣٢ ،٧٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٠٧ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪٧٣ ....‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١١٣ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪٢٣ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪١١٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ‪٧٦ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ‪١٠٩ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪١٧٠ .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ‪٧٠ ..................................‬‬

‫ﺥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬

‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪٢٠٤ ،١٣٣ ،٧١ ،٥٧ ........................‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪) A/V‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪١٦٩ ،١٦٠ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ‪٥٢ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪١٦٩ ،١٦٠ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ → ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٨٨ .......................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٢ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٨٧ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪٩٢ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٩٣ ،٧٤ ،٧٠ ...............‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٩ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪١٩٣ ،٨٤ .............‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ‪١٦٠ ،١٣١ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٦٥ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪٥٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٤٠ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ ‪٤٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪٢٢٤ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪١٧٣ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪٥٣ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪١٨٥ .................................... DPOF‬‬
‫‪٢٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٥٥ ،٥٨ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪١٧٠ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪٣٧ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪١٥٩ ،١٤٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٧٣ ،١١٠ ...................‬‬ ‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٦٧ ،١٦٠ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ → ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺽ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦٢ ..........................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١٢٠ ،٦٩ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٦٣ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪١٩٢ ........................... ISO‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪١١٣ ،٦٦ ...(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪٦٣ ...............‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦٨ ..(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪١٦٢ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪١٩٤ ،٤٧ ..........................(AF‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪١٣٨ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٣ ..........................................LCD‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )‪٢٠٢ ،١١٧ .........................(AF‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٤٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١٢٠ ،٦٩ ......................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪١٣٩ ................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٢٠٢ ،١١٧ ،٤٧ .............‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٤٤ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‪٤٨ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٥٥ ،٥٨ .........................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٤٠ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ → (AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٤٦ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ → ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٨ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٧ ...... AI Servo‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪٣٨ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٦٦ .................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪١٧٤ ....... (RGB/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٨٦ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪٨٦ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٢٧ ،٨٣ ......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﺮﺓ‪١٣٨ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪٨٦ .................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٩٣ ،٧٦ ......................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪٨٦ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪٥٤ .................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪٣٦ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪٧٥ ،٥٤ ،٥٠ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٤٦ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٦٥ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ‪١٧١ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪٢٠٣ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪١٧٣ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ‪١٧٤ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪١٥٦ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٣٩ ،٢٧ .................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪١٥٧ ......‬‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٨ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ‪١٥٨ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪٢٠٣ ................................‬‬
‫‪٢٣٩‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪٨٢ ،٧٩ ،٦٤ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ‪١٠٩ ،٢٨ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٦٤ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪٢٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪١٤٨ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪٢٧ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪٦٤ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ → ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٤٩ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٧٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ‪٦٤ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪١٧٩ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪٢٠٦ ،١٤٧ ...‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪١٧٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪٩٨ ................... (FE‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١٨٥ ..................... (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٨٨ .................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٨٢ ،١٨٠ ......................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥٦ ،٤٩ .....................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‪١٨٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪١٩٢ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪١٨٣ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٤٧ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪١٧٦ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٦٥ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪١٢٤ .........‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪١٣١ ،١٢٣ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪١٦٤ .............‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪١٦٧ ،١٦٠ ،١٣١ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ‪١٦٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٣٢ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٥ – ٣٣ ،٢١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪١٣١ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﻓﻚ ‪٣٣ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪١٢٧ .........‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٨ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪١٣١ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٥٧ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٦٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٣٤ ،١١٢ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪١٣١ .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪١٣٢ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪١٦٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٢٣ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٥٦ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪١٣٤ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ‪١٥٨ ،١٢٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪١٢٩ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٦٧ ،١٦٠ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٦٧ ،١٦٠ ..................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١٥٦ ..........‬‬
‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٧٣ ،١٢٦ ،١١٠ .........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٥٥ ،٥٨ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٢١٢ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ‪٢١٨ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪١٩٨ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٤٠ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻍ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪١٩٨ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪٢٠٥ ،٢٣ .........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٢٠٣ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪٢٠ ................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ‪٨٢ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪٧٧ ،١٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪١٧٣ ..................................‬‬
‫‪٢٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٣٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪٧٥ ،٥١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٥١ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪٧١ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٧١ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٣٤ ،١١٢ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪١٣٤ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪١٤٤ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪٢١٤ ،١٦٩ .................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٩١ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪٧٥ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‪٩٤ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪٧٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪٢٢ - ١٦ ........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ‪٢٠٦ ،١٤٧ .....‬‬
‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٠٣ ،٤٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪٩٦ .......................................... ICC‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪٢١٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪١١٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٧١ ،٧٠ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠ .......................................‬‬
‫‪) A-DEP‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪٨٥ ........................‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ‪٨٣ ..........................‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪٨٠ ..................................‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ‪٧٨ .....‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪٦٠ .................‬‬
‫‪) C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ( ‪٥٥ ..........................‬‬
‫‪) 1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪٤٦ .............................‬‬
‫‪) 7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪٤٩ ...................‬‬
‫‪) 2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪٥٠ .........................‬‬
‫‪) 3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪٥١ ...........................‬‬
‫‪) 4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ( ‪٥٢ ............................‬‬
‫‪) 5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ( ‪٥٣ .................................‬‬
‫‪) 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ( ‪٥٤ ...................‬‬
‫‪٢٤١‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٩٥ ،١٠٦ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪٧٥ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٦٩ ،١٦٧ ،١٦٠ ،٣ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٠٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٣٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪١٤٣ ............................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ‪١٠٩ ،٢٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪٧٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪٧٦ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪١٤٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪١٤٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٩٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪٣٦ ..................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪١٦٣ ...................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٧١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪٥١ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪٨٤ ..................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪٣٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪٨٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪٨٩ .........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪٨٢ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪١٣١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪١٩٩ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٦٩ ،٣٣ .............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢١٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٢٠ .......................................‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫‪) k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪١٢٣ .......................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪١١٨ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ‪١١٣ .........‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٨٦ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٩٠ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪١٩٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٩١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٣٨ ...............................‬‬

‫‪٢٤٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ >‪<0‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ(‬
‫>‪<S‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬

‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<V‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪٢٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪ Q‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Q‬‬
‫ ﻓﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Quick Control‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪) ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬ ‫‪Drive mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪Metering mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪AF mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪ ،(C‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٤٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [1 Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬

‫‪ A‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<XA‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <S‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ( ﻭ>‪) <U‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪<Z‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫>‪<D‬‬
‫>‪<6‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬

‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫>‪ <A‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫>‪<S‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬

‫>‪ <O‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬

‫‪٢٤٧‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪) ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬

‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪Picture Style‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪Drive mode‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫‪AF mode‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪Metering mode‬‬
‫‪ncxz‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪<•> (AF‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫‪) ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪٢٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،shutter‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎ‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪.(<C‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<Q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ‬
‫>‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ >‪.(<5> <3> <7‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻟﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٤٩‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻄﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﺑ‬
‫ﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ : d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬

‫‪ :s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬

‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬
‫ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬
‫ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪ :E‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬

‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫>‪) <f‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<ZE‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪) X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪:‬‬

‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪)9‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪:(AI Focus‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪)Z‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪:(AI Servo‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬

‫‪ S‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬

‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬

‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬
‫ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫‪٢٥١‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪ : Z‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Z‬‬
‫ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫>‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫‪ shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬

‫‪ i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪N‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<YiQ‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬
‫‪ : u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ : i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫‪ : Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ*‬
‫‪ : l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ : q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ >‪ <Q‬ﻭ>‪<q‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[6 Live View function settings‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ °٢٣‬ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫‪ °٧٣‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫‪٢٥٣‬‬
 ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬

‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <A‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫‪ ١١‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬

‫‪٢٥٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬

‫‪) Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪L‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪٢٥٥‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ‪EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬‬

‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ EOS DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬

‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪/‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪) ZoomBrowser EX‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/ (Win‬‬

‫‪) ImageBrowser‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(Mac‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪/‬ﻓﺮﺯ‪/‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ MOV‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪Picture Style Editor‬‬

‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺒﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‪/‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٥٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ً‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫)ﺳﻴﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪) EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Canon EOS‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫‪) [Digital Installer‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon EOS‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Easy Installation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ( ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪) [Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٥٧‬‬
 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ PDF‬ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ]‪Software INSTRUCTION‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪) [MANUAL‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ]‪[My Computer‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ]‪ [English‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Macintosh‬‬

‫‪EUx.xM_E_xx‬‬ ‫‪EUx.xW_E_xx‬‬ ‫‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫‪DPPx.xM_E_xx‬‬ ‫‪DPPx.xW_E_xx‬‬ ‫‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪ZoomBrowser EX /‬‬
‫‪IBx.xM_E_xx‬‬ ‫‪ZBx.xW_E_xx‬‬
‫‪ImageBrowser‬‬
‫‪PSEx.xM_E_xx‬‬ ‫‪PSEx.xW_E_xx‬‬ ‫‪Picture Style Editor‬‬

‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮًﺍ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Adobe Reader‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٫٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ( ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Adobe Reader‬ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٥٨‬‬
٢٥٩
 CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
CANON U.S.A. INC.
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A.
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬،‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
1-800-OK-CANON
CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS ‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH
5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada
CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE
2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada
‫ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬،‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
1-800-OK-CANON
CANON EUROPA N.V. ‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17,Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON UK LTD.
Woodhatch Reigate,Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, (MI), Italy
CANON Schweiz A.G.
Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland
Canon GmbH
Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vienna, Austria
CANON España,S.A.
Av. De Europa,6 Alcobendas 28108 Madrid, Spain
CANON Portugal S.A.
Rua Alfredo da Silva,14 Alfragide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC. ‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
703 Waterford Way, Suite 400 Miami, FL 33126,U.S.A. ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬
CANON (China) Co., LTD. ‫ﺎﻴﺳﺁ‬
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.
Gangnam Finance Center 17F, 737,Yeoksam-Dong, Gangnam-Gu, Seoul, 135-984, Korea
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺎﻧﻮﺳﻴﺎ‬
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD.
Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC. ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan

‫ ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ‬.٢٠١٠ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻨﺎﻳﺮ‬
.Canon ‫ ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬،‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬

‫ُﻃﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬ CANON INC. ‫ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬٢٠١٠ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬ CT1-1036-000